Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor...

282
2008 Fit Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year. © 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31SAA610

Transcript of Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor...

Page 1: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

2008 Fit

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.© 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31SAA610

Page 2: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Fit. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular vehicle.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SAAC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

07/06/28 20:15:39 31SAA610 0001 

Page 3: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Fit was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

07/06/28 20:15:44 31SAA610 0002 

Page 4: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

07/06/28 20:15:48 31SAA610 0003 

Page 5: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

07/06/28 20:15:58 31SAA610 0004 

Page 6: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

07/06/28 20:16:00 31SAA610 0005 

Page 7: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(main controls)

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items)

(climate control, audio, security, and cruise control)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

..........Instruments and Controls . 57

..................................................................Features . 101

.......................................................................Before Driving . 135

.........................................................................................Driving . 151

.................................................Maintenance . 177

...............................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 217

..............................................Technical Information . 241

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 257

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 261

IND

EX

1

07/06/28 20:16:10 31SAA610 0006 

Page 8: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-ties, and technical information.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Driving

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Before Driving

Service Information Summary

Maintenance

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Technical Information

2

07/06/28 20:16:26 31SAA610 0007 

Page 9: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

* : If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

A/T model is shown.

AUDIO SYSTEMGAUGES

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

PARKING BRAKEMANUAL TRANSMISSION

(P.9, 25)

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

(P.31)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

(P.9, 31)

(P.60)(P.67)

(P.79)

(P.94)

(P.138)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET(P.99) (P.96)

(P.157)(P.155)

(P.102)

(P.107)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P.74)

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.95)

POWER WINDOWSWITCH

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

07/06/28 20:16:33 31SAA610 0008 

Page 10: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

* *

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.

1 :2 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HORN

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

MIRROR CONTROLS

(P.31)

PADDLE SHIFTER(DOWNSHIFT)

PADDLE SHIFTER(UPSHIFT)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

(P.162)

(P.72)

(P.95)

(P.138)

(P.75) (P.131) (P.127)

(P.99)

(P.74)

(P.71)

(P.74)(P.162)(P.74)

1

2

2

2 2

2

2

07/06/28 20:16:40 31SAA610 0009 

Page 11: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 20

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 22......Airbag System Components . 22

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37

...Additional Safety Precautions . 38Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 39.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.........Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

...............................With LATCH . 43.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 45

..............................With a Tether . 47...........Protecting Larger Children . 49

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49..................Using a Booster Seat . 50

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 51

...Additional Safety Precautions . 52.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

...................................Safety Labels . 54

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

07/06/28 20:16:44 31SAA610 0010 

Page 12: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

14

5234

179

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

6

07/06/28 20:16:54 31SAA610 0011 

Page 13: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(5)

(7)

(10)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(8)(6)

(2)

(9)

(11)

(4)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

07/06/28 20:17:01 31SAA610 0012 

Page 14: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

07/06/28 20:17:12 31SAA610 0013 

Page 15: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

28

25 30

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

07/06/28 20:17:20 31SAA610 0014 

Page 16: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

07/06/28 20:17:26 31SAA610 0015 

Page 17: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand tailgate open indicator works.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open indicator on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen any door or the tailgate is nottightly closed.

Locking the doors and the tailgatealso helps prevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door or thetailgate when you come to a stop.

34 38

6279

CONTINUED

Close and Lock the Doors Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction 1. 2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

07/06/28 20:17:36 31SAA610 0016 

Page 18: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down (seepage ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

7586

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults and Teens

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

07/06/28 20:17:44 31SAA610 0017 

Page 19: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.Have passengers adjust their head

restraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isproperly positioned.

87 87

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

07/06/28 20:17:52 31SAA610 0018 

Page 20: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The seat belt in the center positionof the back seat can be unlatchedand retracted to allow the back seatto be folded up or down. This seatbelt should be latched whenever theseat-back is in an upright position.See page for how to unlatch andrelatch the seat belt.

93

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

07/06/28 20:18:00 31SAA610 0019 

Page 21: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

18

Protecting Adults and Teens

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASE BUTTONS

07/06/28 20:18:08 31SAA610 0020 

Page 22: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant Women

16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

07/06/28 20:18:14 31SAA610 0021 

Page 23: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If they do, they could bevery seriously injured in a crash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Never let passengers ride in thearea in front of a folded-up rearseat or on top of a folded-downrear seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

07/06/28 20:18:22 31SAA610 0022 

Page 24: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

27 28

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

18

07/06/28 20:18:31 31SAA610 0023 

Page 25: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseating position on the rear seat isequipped with a detachable seat beltthat has two parts: a small latch plateand an anchor buckle.

The detachable seat belt shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable seat belt, see page .

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

14

45

93

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

DETACHABLE ANCHOR

07/06/28 20:18:40 31SAA610 0024 

Page 26: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

203

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

07/06/28 20:18:49 31SAA610 0025 

Page 27: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

07/06/28 20:18:53 31SAA610 0026 

Page 28: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

22

(8)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

(4)

(13)

(7)

(5)

(4)(6)

(10)

(12)

(9)

(11)(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(12) Outer Lap Tensioners(13) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

07/06/28 20:18:58 31SAA610 0027 

Page 29: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

25

28

30

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(15)

(15)

(14)

(16)(16)

(14) Side Curtain Airbags(15) Side Impact Sensors (First)(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

07/06/28 20:19:05 31SAA610 0028 

Page 30: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

27

31

31

20

29

2730

18

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

07/06/28 20:19:14 31SAA610 0029 

Page 31: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

27

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

07/06/28 20:19:23 31SAA610 0030 

Page 32: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will deploy at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

latched

26

07/06/28 20:19:31 31SAA610 0031 

Page 33: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

07/06/28 20:19:41 31SAA610 0032 

Page 34: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

If your vehicle has optional floormats, make sure the mat behind thefront passenger’s seat is hooked tothe floor mat anchor (see page ).If it is not, the mat may interferewith the proper operation of thesensors and operation of the seat.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

31

203

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

28

07/06/28 20:19:49 31SAA610 0033 

Page 35: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.To get the best protection from the

side airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

07/06/28 20:19:57 31SAA610 0034 

Page 36: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

30

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

07/06/28 20:20:06 31SAA610 0035 

Page 37: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them. This indicator

alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

61

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

U.S. Canada

U.S.

Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

07/06/28 20:20:15 31SAA610 0036 

Page 38: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s), such as a folded-down back seat, that are touchingthe rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

32

07/06/28 20:20:25 31SAA610 0037 

Page 39: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during a crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

07/06/28 20:20:31 31SAA610 0038 

Page 40: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children aged 12 andunder.

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

39 4849 52

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

07/06/28 20:20:39 31SAA610 0039 

Page 41: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:Children who ride in back are less

likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children aged 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

31

49

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

07/06/28 20:20:48 31SAA610 0040 

Page 42: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

36

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

07/06/28 20:21:01 31SAA610 0041 

Page 43: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

15

14

49

86

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

07/06/28 20:21:09 31SAA610 0042 

Page 44: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

45 46

80

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Additional Safety Precautions

38

07/06/28 20:21:17 31SAA610 0043 

Page 45: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Child Seat Type

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat PlacementProtecting Infants

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

07/06/28 20:21:27 31SAA610 0044 

Page 46: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

40

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

07/06/28 20:21:35 31SAA610 0045 

Page 47: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

31

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

07/06/28 20:21:45 31SAA610 0046 

Page 48: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

42

07/06/28 20:21:52 31SAA610 0047 

Page 49: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type

BUTTON

07/06/28 20:22:01 31SAA610 0048 

Page 50: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Route the tether strap over theseat-back and through the headrestraint legs.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

5.

4. 6.

7.

8.

Installing a Child Seat

44

TETHER STRAP HOOKFlexible type

ANCHOR

07/06/28 20:22:09 31SAA610 0049 

Page 51: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of therear seat, remove its head restraint,and make sure the detachable seatbelt is securely latched (see page

).

2.1.

3.93

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

07/06/28 20:22:17 31SAA610 0050 

Page 52: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

46

07/06/28 20:22:22 31SAA610 0051 

Page 53: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat.

Each rear outside seating positionhas an anchorage point on the seat-back, and the center seating positionhas an anchorage point in the ceilingnear the tailgate.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

3.

2.45

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Installing a Child Seat

Using an Outer Anchor

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHORANCHOR

07/06/28 20:22:31 31SAA610 0052 

Page 54: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Route the tether strap over theseat-back, then attach the tetherstrap hook to the anchor, makingsure the tether strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), open theanchor cover.

Remove the rear center headrestraint, and store it in a safeplace.

1.

2.

3.

4.45

Using the Center Anchor

Installing a Child Seat

48

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHORANCHOR

COVER

07/06/28 20:22:38 31SAA610 0053 

Page 55: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

07/06/28 20:22:46 31SAA610 0054 

Page 56: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

3.

4.

5.

35

Protecting Larger Children

Using a Booster Seat

50

07/06/28 20:22:54 31SAA610 0055 

Page 57: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

14 49

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

07/06/28 20:23:02 31SAA610 0056 

Page 58: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

Supervise the child. Even a maturechild sometimes needs to bereminded to fasten the seat belt orsit properly.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger Children

52

07/06/28 20:23:11 31SAA610 0057 

Page 59: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

07/06/28 20:23:19 31SAA610 0058 

Page 60: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Canadian modelsU.S. models

Safety Labels

54

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

07/06/28 20:23:31 31SAA610 0059 

Page 61: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Canadian modelsU.S. modelsU.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

HOOD RADIATOR CAP DOORJAMBS

07/06/28 20:23:45 31SAA610 0060 

Page 62: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

56

07/06/28 20:23:47 31SAA610 0061 

Page 63: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58............................Instrument Panel . 59

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60.............................................Gauges . 67

...................................Trip Meter . 67.....................................Odometer . 68

..................................Fuel Gauge . 68..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68

..................Maintenance Minder . 69Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 70.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 71

.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 72........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74

.................Hazard Warning Button . 74

.................Rear Window Defogger . 74..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 75

...............................Keys and Locks . 76........................Immobilizer System . 77

................................Ignition Switch . 78......................................Door Locks . 79

......................Power Door Locks . 79..............Childproof Door Locks . 80

............................................Tailgate . 81.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

.................................................Seats . 86

..............................Power Windows . 94.............................................Mirrors . 95

.................................Parking Brake . 96...........Interior Convenience Items . 97

.......................Beverage Holders . 98....................................Glove Box . 98

...........Accessory Power Socket . 99......................................Sun Visor . 99

.................................Interior Lights . 99

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

07/06/28 20:23:51 31SAA610 0062 

Page 64: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

* : If equipped

Control Locations

58

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.95)

POWER WINDOWSWITCH

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER DOORLOCK MASTERSWITCH(P.79)

(P.94)

(P.138) ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS (P.60)

(P.67)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

MANUAL TRANSMISSION(P.157)

(P.155)

AUDIO SYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P.102)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE

(P.31) (P.99)(P.96)

(P.107)(P.74)

07/06/28 20:23:57 31SAA610 0063 

Page 65: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

: If equipped

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

(P.64)

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

DAYTIMERUNNINGLIGHTSINDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR(P.66)

LOW TEMPERATUREINDICATOR(P.63)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.62)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR (P.30, 61)

HIGH TEMPERATUREINDICATOR(P.63)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR(P.66)

(P.64)

(P.62)LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.64)

(P.62)

(P.66)

WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR (P.65)

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR(P.65)

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR(P.31, 61)

CRUISE MAININDICATOR (P.65)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR (P.65)

ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING INDICATOR(P.62)

TPMS INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.18, 60)

(P.60, 232)

(P.231)

(P.60, 230)

(P.60, 230)

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.65)

07/06/28 20:24:05 31SAA610 0064 

Page 66: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The instrument panel has manyindicators that give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

See page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If it remains on after you havefully released the parking brakewhile the engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

2.

1.231

230

230

232

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicatorParking Brake and

Brake SystemIndicator (Red)

Instrument Panel Indicators

60

U.S. Canada

07/06/28 20:24:15 31SAA610 0065 

Page 67: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

1831

30

Instrument Panel Indicators

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

CanadaU.S.

07/06/28 20:24:23 31SAA610 0066 

Page 68: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition to the ON(II) position and goes off after theengine starts. If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theelectric power steering system. Ifthis happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes on again while driving, takethe vehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the indicator on, theEPS may be turned off, making thevehicle harder to steer.

If the power steering systemoverheats while driving, the assist isreduced and steering may feelslightly harder.

Driving with the power steeringsystem continuously overheating cancause system damage.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 1.7 US gal (6.3 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

This indicator comes on if any dooror the tailgate is not closed tightly.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .168

Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Door and Tailgate OpenIndicator

62

07/06/28 20:24:32 31SAA610 0067 

Page 69: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the engine coolant. Itnormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and goes off after a fewseconds. In normal drivingconditions, this indicator should notblink or stay on. In severe drivingconditions, such as very hot weatheror a long period of uphill driving, thisindicator may blink. This means theengine coolant temperature is high.If the indicator begins to blink whileyou are driving, be sure to slow downto prevent overheating. If theindicator stays on, pull safely to theside of the road and turn off theengine. See page for instructionsand precautions on checking theengine’s cooling system.

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the engine coolant. Ifthere is no problem, this indicatorcomes on when the engine is cold. Ifit comes on when the engine is warm(normal operating temperature),have the vehicle inspected by yourdealer as soon as possible.

Do not drive the vehicle while theindicator is on or the engine may bedamaged.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

228

198

Instrument Panel Indicators

High TemperatureIndicator

Low TemperatureIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

07/06/28 20:24:40 31SAA610 0068 

Page 70: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

170

73218

238

U.S. models only U.S. models only

On Sport model

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

64

07/06/28 20:24:49 31SAA610 0069 

Page 71: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

73

73

131

131

192

Canadian models only

Canadian models onlyOn Sport model and Canadian LX model

On Sport model and Canadian LX model

High Beam Indicator

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

07/06/28 20:25:00 31SAA610 0070 

Page 72: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position. This indicator comes on when the

security system is set. See pagefor more information on the

security system.130

77179

On Sport model

Maintenance MinderIndicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Security System Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

66

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

07/06/28 20:25:09 31SAA610 0071 

Page 73: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the lastselection is displayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

Trip Meter

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

FUEL GAUGE

U.S. model is shown.

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

ODOMETER

TRIP METER

INFORMATION DISPLAY

SELECT/RESET KNOB

07/06/28 20:25:17 31SAA610 0072 

Page 74: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message appears as text on theinformation display after you startthe engine. The message appearsfrom CHECK to FUEL, then to CAPrepeatedly.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel fill cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL goesout after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If it does not go out, haveyour dealer inspect the vehicle. Formore information, see page .

Turn the engine off and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenthe cap, then retighten it until itclicks at least once. You can cyclethe message off of the display bypressing the select/reset knobrepeatedly, but this message will bedisplayed each time the engine isstarted. It will take several days ofnormal driving for the vehicle to turnthe warning off.

231

Odometer

Fuel Gauge

Check Fuel Cap Indicator

Gauges

68

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

07/06/28 20:25:24 31SAA610 0073 

Page 75: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

179

Maintenance Minder

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

07/06/28 20:25:28 31SAA610 0074 

Page 76: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

* *

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.

1 :2 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

70

HORN

MIRROR CONTROLS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P.31)

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS(P.72)

(P.95)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P.138)

(P.99)

(P.71)

(P.74)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P.74)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT) PADDLE SHIFTER (UPSHIFT)INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

(P.75) (P.131)(P.127)

(P.162)(P.74)

(P.162)

1

2

2

2

2

2 2

07/06/28 20:25:35 31SAA610 0075 

Page 77: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

---

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

OFFWhen you turn the wiper switch tothe ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper willreturn to its parked position.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Windshield Wiper Rear Window Wiper and WasherMIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

07/06/28 20:25:46 31SAA610 0076 

Page 78: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

-Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer.

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer.

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return to thecenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beams

Fog lights offFog lights on

3.

4.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

7.8.

On Sport model

Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights

72

07/06/28 20:25:53 31SAA610 0077 

Page 79: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

- -Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when the headlightsare turned off.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Push the leverforward and the high beam indicatorwill come on (see page ). Pull itback to return to low beams.

65Canadian models only

On Sport model

Headlights Daytime Running Lights

Fog Lights

High Beams

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

07/06/28 20:26:02 31SAA610 0078 

Page 80: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

You can change the instrument panelbrightness only when the lightswitch is on.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. You must manuallyshut off the rear window defoggerwhen it is no longer needed.

Turn the knob on the upper part ofthe instrument panel to adjust thebrightness.

You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.You will also hear a beep when themaximum level is canceled byturning the knob a click to the left.

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning ButtonInstrument Panel Brightness

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

74

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

07/06/28 20:26:10 31SAA610 0079 

Page 81: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

07/06/28 20:26:19 31SAA610 0080 

Page 82: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Your vehicle comes with the twoignition keys.

On Sport model All models except Sport

All models except Sport

Keys and Locks

76

KEY NUMBER TAG KEY NUMBER TAGKEYS WITHTRANSMITTER

KEYS

07/06/28 20:26:27 31SAA610 0081 

Page 83: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

07/06/28 20:26:35 31SAA610 0082 

Page 84: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power socket in thisposition.

LOCK (0)

ON (II)

START (III)

ACCESSORY (I)

Ignition Switch

78

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

07/06/28 20:26:43 31SAA610 0083 

Page 85: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To lock the doors and the tailgate,push the top of the master door lockswitch on the driver’s door, push inthe lock tab on the driver’s door, oruse the key in the outside door lockon the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of the masterdoor lock switch unlocks all doorsand the tailgate.

Each door has a lock tab on the topof the door. Push in the tab to lockthe door, and pull it out to unlock.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push in thelock tab and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, pull and hold theoutside door handle, then push in thelock tab. Release the handle, thenclose the door.

Each front door can be locked orunlocked with the ignition key.

CONTINUED

On Canadian DX model

All models except SportAll models except Canadian DX

Power Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

TABMASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK

UNLOCK

07/06/28 20:26:51 31SAA610 0084 

Page 86: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The lock tab on each passenger’sdoor locks and unlocks only thatdoor. Pulling up the driver’s lock tabonly unlocks the driver’s door. Tounlock only the driver’s door fromthe outside, turn the key and releaseit. If you turn it again, the remainingdoors and the tailgate unlock.

To lock a passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push in thelock tab and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, remove key fromignition switch and push in the locktab or push the top of the masterdoor lock switch, then close the door.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition switch, the masterdoor lock switch is disabled. It is notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.If you try to lock the open driver’sdoor with the key in the ignitionswitch by pushing in the lock tab, thetabs on all doors pop up when youclose the door.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks

Door Locks

80

Lock

Unlock

LEVER

07/06/28 20:26:58 31SAA610 0085 

Page 87: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The tailgate will lock or unlock whenyou lock or unlock the driver’s doorby using the key, the lock tab on thedriver’s door, the master door lockswitch or the remote transmitter (ifequipped).

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up.You can lock or unlock the tailgate

with the key.

CONTINUED

All models except Sport

All models except Canadian DX

Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

KEY

HANDLE

UNLOCK

LOCK

07/06/28 20:27:04 31SAA610 0086 

Page 88: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To close the tailgate, hold thetailgate handle, lower the tailgate,then press down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

Push the release lever to the right asshown.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Place a cloth on the edge of thecover, then use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver to remove the cover onthe back of the tailgate.53

On Sport model

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Unlocking the Tailgate

Tailgate

82

TAILGATEHANDLE

Unlock

Lock

07/06/28 20:27:12 31SAA610 0087 

Page 89: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

- -

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the remaining doorsand the tailgate. Some exterior lightswill flash twice each time you pressthe button.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any door or the tailgatewithin 30 seconds, the light fades out.If you relock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelight will go off immediately.

If you do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock and the securitysystem will set.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash once. Whenyou push LOCK twice within 5seconds, the horn will sound toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security systemhas set. You cannot lock the doorsand the tailgate if any door or thetailgate is not fully closed or the keyis in the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

On Sport model

UNLOCK PANIC

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

07/06/28 20:27:19 31SAA610 0088 

Page 90: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

1.

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

84

SCREW

07/06/28 20:27:27 31SAA610 0089 

Page 91: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remove the old battery, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

5.

4.

2.

3.

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

TAB

BATTERY

07/06/28 20:27:35 31SAA610 0090 

Page 92: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

-See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

The seat can also be adjustedforward and backward using thelever on the side of the seat-back.Pull out the lever and push it forward,holding the seat-back with your hand.Move the seat to the desired position,and check the seat to make sure it islocked in position.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats

86

LEVER

07/06/28 20:27:42 31SAA610 0091 

Page 93: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

13

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

You can adjust the angle of the rearseat-backs separately. To change theseat-back angle, pull up the releaselever on the outer side of the seat-back.

CONTINUED

Head RestraintsRear Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

LEVER

07/06/28 20:27:50 31SAA610 0092 

Page 94: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The head restraints in the rear outerseating positions do not adjust forheight. To remove one for cleaningor repair, push the release button,and lift the restraint up.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust a restraint. Do not attempt toadjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sideways,and push the restraint down.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Seats

88

RELEASEBUTTON

FRONT

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

07/06/28 20:27:55 31SAA610 0093 

Page 95: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Remove the front head restraints(see page ), and store themsecurely.

You can recline the seat-backs on thefront seats so they are level with therear seat cushions, making a largecushioned area. To do this:

Recline the rear seat-backs as farbackward as possible (see page

).

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isproperly positioned.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

1.

2.

87

88

CONTINUED

Reclining the Front Seats

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

SLIDE LEVERSEAT-BACK ANGLEADJUSTMENT LEVER

REAR CENTER RELEASE BUTTON

07/06/28 20:28:03 31SAA610 0094 

Page 96: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Pull up the rear seat cushion, andfold the seat leg down. Push the seatcushion firmly against the seat-backto lock it.

The left and right rear seat cushionscan be lifted up separately to makeroom for cargo.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold up the seat cushion.

Pull up the seat-back angleadjustment lever, and pivot theseat-back backward until it is levelwith the rear seat cushion.

Using the slide lever, move thefront seat cushions as far forwardas possible.

Reverse this procedure to return thefront seats to the upright position.

When you return the seat-back to itsupright position, hold the seat-backto keep it from going up too quickly.

Make sure you install the headrestraints and securely lock the seatsbefore driving.

3.

4.

Seats

Folding the Rear Seat Up

90

07/06/28 20:28:11 31SAA610 0095 

Page 97: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When you fold down the driver’s siderear seat, use the latch plate torelease the center seat belt from thedetachable anchor (see page ).Allow the seat belt to retract into theholder on the ceiling, and store thebuckles in it.

Move the front seat cushions asfar forward as possible.

The rear seat-backs can be foldeddown for more cargo room.

Each side folds down separately, soyou can still carry a passenger in therear outer seating position.

Remove any items from the seatbefore folding down the seat-back.

Make sure there are no items on thefloor before folding down the seats.

To return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position, first make surethere are no items on the floor, thenpull up the seat leg fully, and pushdown the seat cushion slowly whileholding it with your hands. Set theseat leg in the floor guide. A latchcomes out when the leg is setproperly. 1.

93

CONTINUED

Folding the Rear Seat Down

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

LATCH PLATE

FLOOR GUIDE LATCH

LEG

07/06/28 20:28:20 31SAA610 0096 

Page 98: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

To return the seat-back to its uprightposition, move the front seat forwardagain, then lift up the seat-back.

While lifting the seat-back, the seatcushion may come up with it. Tosecure the seat cushion, see page .

Make sure the seat-back and seatcushion are locked securely and allrear shoulder belts are positioned infront of the rear seat-backs. In thecenter seating position of the rearseat, be sure the detachable anchoris latched securely before using theseat belt (see page ).

Move the front seat backward tothe desired position. Make surethe seat is locked in place.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Make sure that the folded down rearseat does not interfere with the frontpassenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors and the front passenger’sseat belt reminder indicator to workimproperly (see pages and ).Also check the passenger airbag offindicator to assure proper operationof the passenger’s front airbag.

Make sure the rear outer headrestraint is locked in place. If youfold down the driver’s side seat-back, also adjust the rear centerhead restraint to its lowestposition.

Pull up the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

5.

3118

146

93

91

2.

3.

4.

Seats

Carrying Cargo

92

RELEASE LEVER

07/06/28 20:28:29 31SAA610 0097 

Page 99: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Tug on the seat belt to verify thatthe detachable anchor is securelylatched. Make sure the seat belt isnot twisted.

The seat belt in the rear center seatis equipped with a detachable anchor.

This allows the center seat belt to beunlatched when the driver’s side rearseat is folded.

Pull out the small latch plate and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Line up the triangle marks on thesmall latch plate and anchor bucklewhen reattaching the belt and buckle.

CONTINUED

Detachable Anchor

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

SMALL LATCHPLATE

LATCH PLATE

SMALL LATCH PLATE

TRIANGLEMARKS

ANCHOR BUCKLE

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

07/06/28 20:28:38 31SAA610 0098 

Page 100: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

- To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go down all theway. To stop the window, pull backon the window switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want to stop thewindow. To close the window, pullback on the switch and hold it.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert the latch plate into the slot onthe side of the anchor buckle. Storethe detachable anchor and seat beltlatch plates in the retractor housing.

To close the window, pull back onthe switch and hold it.

AUTO

Power Windows

Seats, Power Windows

94

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

ANCHOR BUCKLE

LATCH PLATEClosing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

07/06/28 20:28:45 31SAA610 0099 

Page 101: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengerwindows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch off when youhave children in the vehicle so theydo not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

All models except Canadian DX

Adjusting the Power MirrorsMirrors

Power Windows, Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

TAB

07/06/28 20:28:53 31SAA610 0100 

Page 102: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

60

3.

4.

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake

96

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

07/06/28 20:29:00 31SAA610 0101 

Page 103: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

VANITY MIRROR

SEAT-BACK POCKET

SUN VISOR

PASSENGER’STRAY

BEVERAGE HOLDERSREAR SIDE POCKET(RIGHT SIDE)

COAT HOOK

GLOVE BOX

COIN TRAY

CENTER POCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET

07/06/28 20:29:05 31SAA610 0102 

Page 104: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Open the glove box by pushing thebutton. Close it with a firm push.

Glove BoxBeverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

98

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

07/06/28 20:29:11 31SAA610 0103 

Page 105: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch; ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

Open any door.Unlock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or the remotetransmitter (if equipped).

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight fades out in about 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe door activated position) comeson when you remove the key fromthe ignition switch. If you do notopen a door, the light fades out inabout 30 seconds.

To use the accessory power socket,pull up the cover. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after 3minutes.

Ceiling LightAccessory Power Socket

Sun Visor

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

DOOR ACTIVATED

OFF

ON

07/06/28 20:29:22 31SAA610 0104 

Page 106: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

100

07/06/28 20:29:25 31SAA610 0105 

Page 107: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 102..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 107

............AM/FM Radio Reception . 112.................................Playing a Disc .114

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 123..................Protecting Your Discs . 124

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 127.................Radio Theft Protection . 128

..........................Setting the Clock . 129............................Security System . 130

...............................Cruise Control . 131

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

Features

Features

101

07/06/28 20:29:30 31SAA610 0106 

Page 108: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

* : If equipped

Vents, Heating, and A/C

102

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERBUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE CONTROL DIALFAN CONTROL DIAL

FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATIONLEVER

U.S. model is shown.

07/06/28 20:29:33 31SAA610 0107 

Page 109: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

This lever controls the source of theair going into the system. When youslide the lever to the side, air isbrought in from outside the vehicle(fresh air mode). When you selectthe side, air from the vehicle’sinterior is sent through the systemagain (recirculation mode).

Use the mode control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically turns onthe A/C (if equipped). You cannotturn the A/C off in this mode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).74

If equipped

Rear Window Defogger Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever

Mode Control Dial

Airflow Controls

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Features

103

07/06/28 20:29:51 31SAA610 0108 

Page 110: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then dischargesit through vents near the tailgate.

Select and .Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Check the hightemperature indicator (see page

). If the indicator begins to blink,turn off the A/C until the indicatorgoes off.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and .Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in .

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select .Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.3.

63

If equipped

If the interior is very warm,

Using the Heater Using the A/CVentilation

Vents, Heating, and A/C

104

07/06/28 20:30:02 31SAA610 0109 

Page 111: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.Select by sliding the lever.Select . The systemautomatically turns on the A/C(if equipped). The A/C indicatorwill not come on if it waspreviously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

When you select or ,the system automatically turns onthe A/C. This helps to dehumidifythe air and to defog the windshield.In either mode, you cannot turn offthe A/C. When you switch toanother mode, the A/C returns to itsoriginal setting, either on or off, asindicated by the A/C indicator.Turn the fan on.

If the A/C is off, turn it on (ifequipped).Select and .Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

5.

1.2.

3.

1.

2.3.

4.

6.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Defog and DefrostDehumidify the Interior

Features

105

07/06/28 20:30:10 31SAA610 0110 

Page 112: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.Select . The systemautomatically turns on the A/C (ifequipped). The A/C indicator doesnot come on if it was previously off.Select .

1.

2.

3.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Turn Everything Off

106

07/06/28 20:30:17 31SAA610 0111 

Page 113: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Features

107

AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK BAR

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOB

SOUND BUTTONSEEK BAR

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

SOUND BUTTON

AM BUTTON

FM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR TUNE BAR

All models except Sport Sport model

07/06/28 20:30:24 31SAA610 0112 

Page 114: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a

total of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwelve stations.

Use the TUNE bar to tuneto a desired frequency. Press the

side of the bar to tune to ahigher frequency, and the sideto tune to a lower frequency.

Each preset button(1 6) can store one station on AM,and two stations on FM.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button exceptSport model). Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button). On theFM band, ST will be displayed if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SEEK

SCAN

To Play the AM/FM Radio TUNE

PRESET

To Select a Station

Playing the AM/FM Radio

108

07/06/28 20:30:35 31SAA610 0113 

Page 115: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To turn off auto select, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Press the SOUND button repeatedlyto display the equalizer (EQ) [Sportonly], bass, treble, fader, balance,and speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC) settings.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the PWR/VOLknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in thedisplay.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.112

CONTINUED

Adjusting the SoundAUTO SELECT

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Features

109

07/06/28 20:30:46 31SAA610 0114 

Page 116: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Selects the sound equalizersettings.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the PWR/VOL knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

GROOVE Emphasizes the lowand high ends of the entire spectrumfor a ‘‘powerful’’ sound.

SMOOTH Emphasizes the highend of the sound spectrum.

VOCAL Emphasizes the middleend of the sound spectrum.

BEATS Emphasizes the low endof the sound spectrum.

NORMAL The sound spectrum isleveled out for most types of musicand general listening preferences.

You can select any of five equalizersettings. The equalizer adjusts thefrequency ranges to suit the musicor your personal listeningpreferences.

On Sport model

On Sport model

Playing the AM/FM Radio

SVC

EQ

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

Equalizer Settings (EQ)

110

07/06/28 20:30:56 31SAA610 0115 

Page 117: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.

74

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Audio System Lighting

Features

111

07/06/28 20:31:00 31SAA610 0116 

Page 118: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

112

07/06/28 20:31:08 31SAA610 0117 

Page 119: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

113

07/06/28 20:31:14 31SAA610 0118 

Page 120: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Playing a Disc

114

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON

CD SLOT

CD EJECT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

FOLDER BAR

SCAN BUTTON

DISP BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

RANDOMBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

All models except Sport Sport model

DISC SLOT

DISC EJECTBUTTON

07/06/28 20:31:21 31SAA610 0119 

Page 121: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON(II) position.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the CD player, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

Insert a CD about halfway into theCD slot. The drive will pull the CD inthe rest of the way and begin to playit. When the system reaches the endof the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the CD will begin playing where itleft off.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side, to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side.

To move rapidly within atrack, press and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press and hold tomove forward. Press and hold

to move backward. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

CONTINUED

All models except SportTo Play a CD To Change or Select Tracks

SKIP

SEEK

Playing a Disc

Features

115

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

07/06/28 20:31:31 31SAA610 0120 

Page 122: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

Press the AM or FM button toswitch to the radio while a CD isplaying. To play the CD, press theCD button.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

The scan function samplesall the tracks on the disc in the orderthey are recorded on the CD. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track on the CD. Press theSCAN button again to get out of thesystem and play the last tracksampled.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. Press it again to returnto normal play.

To Stop Playing a CDREPEAT

SCAN

RANDOM

Playing a Disc

116

07/06/28 20:31:37 31SAA610 0121 

Page 123: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

The disc player can also play CD-Rsand CD-RWs compressed in CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ in thedisplay. You can see up to 99 folders,and select up to 255 tracks/files.

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1), 24, 22.05, 16 kHz(MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps(MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers (including ROOT):8 layers

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

CONTINUED

On Sport model

Playing a Disc

To Play a Disc

Features

117

07/06/28 20:31:45 31SAA610 0122 

Page 124: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

Each time a new track, file, orfolder plays, other than in normaldisplay mode.

Each time you press the DISP buttonwhile playing a CD-TEXT, thedisplay mode changes from albumname, to track name, to artist name,and then to normal display. Whenplaying a disc in MP3/WMA, thedisplay mode changes from foldername, to file name, to artist tag, toalbum tag, to track tag, and then tonormal display.

If the title is too long, it will not showall at once. Press and hold the DISPbutton, and the rest of the title willshow in the display.

You will also see the album/trackname (CD-TEXT), or the folder/filename (MP3/WMA) under theseconditions:

To play the AM/FM radio when adisc is playing, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button again toswitch back to the disc player.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Insert the disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it. When the system reaches theend of the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.

Playing a Disc

Name Display FunctionTo Load a Disc

118

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

07/06/28 20:31:53 31SAA610 0123 

Page 125: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

CONTINUED

In MP3/WMA modeTo

select a different folder, press theleft or right side of the FOLDER bar.Press the side to skip to thenext folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to theprevious folder.

Each time youpress and release the side, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (files inMP3/WMA mode). Press andrelease the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theFOLDER bar to select folders in thedisc, and use the SEEK/SKIP bar tochange files.

Playing a Disc

FOLDER SELECTIONSEEK/SKIPTo Change or Select Tracks/Files

Features

119

07/06/28 20:32:01 31SAA610 0124 

Page 126: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

---

This feature plays thetracks within a disc in random order.In MP3/WMA mode, all files in allfolders are played in random order.To activate random mode, press theRDM button repeatedly until you seeRDM in the display. Press andrelease the RDM button again toreturn to normal play.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button repeatedly until yousee F-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3/WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button toturn it off.

In MP3/WMA mode

Playing a Disc

RANDOMFOLDER-REPEAT

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

120

07/06/28 20:32:06 31SAA610 0125 

Page 127: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

-- -

In MP3/WMA modeIn MP3/WMA mode The scan function samplesall the tracks/files on the disc in theorder they are recorded on the disc.To activate the scan feature, pressthe SCAN button. You will see SCANin the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track on thedisc. You will also see a track/filename in the display. Press and holdthe SCAN button to get out of thesystem and play the last tracksampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles in the current folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play, to within adisc random play, then to normalplay.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ofeach folder for 10 seconds. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press the SCAN button repeatedlyuntil you see F-SCAN in the display.The folder name is also displayed.To hear the rest of the folder, pressthe SCAN button, within 10 seconds.If you do not, the system advances tothe next folder, plays 10 seconds of it,and continues throughout the rest ofthe folder the same way. When thesystem samples the first file of allfolders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and thesystem plays normally.

Playing a Disc

SCANFOLDER-RANDOM F-SCAN

Features

121

07/06/28 20:32:12 31SAA610 0126 

Page 128: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a disc is playing.Press the CD button to play the disc.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.124

Playing a Disc

To Stop Playing a Disc Protecting Discs

122

07/06/28 20:32:18 31SAA610 0127 

Page 129: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Error Massage Cause Solution

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

125

High temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 125). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages

Features

123

HEAT ERROR

FORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

07/06/28 20:32:24 31SAA610 0128 

Page 130: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

124

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

07/06/28 20:32:34 31SAA610 0129 

Page 131: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

The in-dash disc player has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information ofRecommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs

Features

125

Sealed With PlasticRing

Bubbled/Wrinkled

Warped Burrs

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Chipped/Cracked

07/06/28 20:32:44 31SAA610 0130 

Page 132: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.

Protecting Your Discs

126

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

07/06/28 20:32:54 31SAA610 0131 

Page 133: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The auxiliary input jack isunderneath the accessory powersocket in the center pocket. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton to select it.

U.S. Sport and all Canadian models

Auxiliary Input Jack

Features

127

07/06/28 20:32:59 31SAA610 0132 

Page 134: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons to enter thecode. The code is on the radio codecard included in your owner’smanual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

Radio Theft Protection

128

07/06/28 20:33:04 31SAA610 0133 

Page 135: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Press and hold the CLOCK(SOUND) button until you hear abeep. The displayed time begins toblink. Change the hours by pressingthe H (preset 4) button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing theM (preset 5) button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

Press the CLOCK (SOUND) buttonagain to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed timeis before the half hour, press theCLOCK (SOUND) button untilyou hear a beep, then press the R(preset 6) button to set the clockback to the previous hour. If thedisplayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

Setting the Clock

Features

129

CLOCK

H BUTTON

CLOCK

H BUTTON

M BUTTON

RESETBUTTON

RESETBUTTON

M BUTTON

All models except Sport Sport model

CLOCK BUTTON(SOUND)

CLOCK BUTTON(SOUND)

07/06/28 20:33:12 31SAA610 0134 

Page 136: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and tailgate openindicator on the instrument panel(see page ) to see if the doors andtailgate are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, position lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for 2 minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The alarm will also be activated ifthe passenger inside the lockedvehicle turns the ignition switch on.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, driver’s locktab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

62

On Sport model

Security System

130

NOTE:SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

07/06/28 20:33:19 31SAA610 0135 

Page 137: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

The main switch can be lefton, even when the system is not inuse.

1.

2.

3.On Sport model and Canadian LXmodel

Cruise Control

Using the Cruise Control

Features

131

NOTE:

DECEL/SETBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCEL BUTTONImproper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

07/06/28 20:33:28 31SAA610 0136 

Page 138: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

132

07/06/28 20:33:36 31SAA610 0137 

Page 139: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Tapping either of the paddle shiftersshifts the gear up or down, but doesnot cancel the cruise control. Formore information on driving withpaddle shifters, see page .162

Cruise Control

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Features

133

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

07/06/28 20:33:45 31SAA610 0138 

Page 140: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

134

07/06/28 20:33:47 31SAA610 0139 

Page 141: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 136.................Fuel Recommendation . 136

.........Service Station Procedures . 137....................................Refueling . 137

Opening and Closing................................the Hood . 138

...................................Oil Check . 139.............Engine Coolant Check . 140

...............................Fuel Economy . 141...Accessories and Modifications . 144

.............................Carrying Cargo . 146

Before Driving

Before

Driving

135

07/06/28 20:33:51 31SAA610 0140 

Page 142: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

During this period:

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

136

07/06/28 20:34:00 31SAA610 0141 

Page 143: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Outside of the vehicle, open thefuel fill door by pulling its notchededge.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Before

Driving

137

ATTACHMENT

FUEL FILL CAPTETHER

07/06/28 20:34:08 31SAA610 0142 

Page 144: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Close the fuel fill door.

1. 2.5.

6.

231

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

138

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCHGasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

07/06/28 20:34:16 31SAA610 0143 

Page 145: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

1.

2.

3.

3. 4.

187

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

139

SUPPORT ROD

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

CLIP

GRIP

07/06/28 20:34:26 31SAA610 0144 

Page 146: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for

information about checking otheritems on your vehicle.

190

184

Service Station Procedures

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

140

MAX RESERVE TANK

MIN

07/06/28 20:34:31 31SAA610 0145 

Page 147: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

141

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

07/06/28 20:34:40 31SAA610 0146 

Page 148: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

An under-inflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

184

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

187

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy

142

07/06/28 20:34:52 31SAA610 0147 

Page 149: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

143

Miles perGallon

100 Kilometers

Gallonsof fuel

Milesdriven

Liter L per100 km

07/06/28 20:35:02 31SAA610 0148 

Page 150: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

234

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

144

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

07/06/28 20:35:10 31SAA610 0149 

Page 151: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components, withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Here are some examples:

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) .

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

: If equipped

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle

Before

Driving

145

07/06/28 20:35:17 31SAA610 0150 

Page 152: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Seat-back pocketCenter pocketCargo area side pocketCargo area, including the rearseats when folded up or down.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Front door pockets

Carrying Cargo

146

GLOVE BOX

CARGO AREA

FRONT DOOR POCKETS

CENTER POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETREAR SIDE POCKET(RIGHT SIDE)

07/06/28 20:35:26 31SAA610 0151 

Page 153: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

-Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

(1)

(2)

(3)

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits (Payload)

Before

Driving

147

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

07/06/28 20:35:36 31SAA610 0152 

Page 154: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

- ×

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

(4)

(5)

(6)

Carrying Cargo

148

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight(550 lbs)

Cargo Weight(250 lbs)

Cargo Weight(100 lbs)

07/06/28 20:35:48 31SAA610 0153 

Page 155: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

If you fold the rear seats up ordown, tie down items that could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden stop. Also, keepall cargo below the bottom of thewindows. If it is higher, it couldinterfere with the proper operationof the side curtain airbags.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Do not stack items higher than theback of the rear seats. They canblock your view and be thrownaround the vehicle during a crash.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .53

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo AreaCarrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

149

07/06/28 20:35:55 31SAA610 0154 

Page 156: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

The four hooks on the floor can beused to install a net for securingitems.

Optional Separation Net

Carrying Cargo

150

HOOK

07/06/28 20:36:00 31SAA610 0155 

Page 157: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, and the tirepressure monitoring system(TPMS) .

........................Driving Guidelines . 152

........................Preparing to Drive . 153.......................Starting the Engine . 154

...................Manual Transmission . 155..............Automatic Transmission . 157

Driving with the Paddle.................Shifters (Sport only) . 162

...........................................Parking . 166.............................Braking System . 167

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 168Tire Pressure Monitoring

......................System (TPMS) . 170...........................Towing a Trailer . 173

: If equipped

Driving

Driving

151

07/06/28 20:36:03 31SAA610 0156 

Page 158: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance.

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

On Sport model

Driving Guidelines

152

07/06/28 20:36:08 31SAA610 0157 

Page 159: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

1.

2.

10.

14

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

95

75

59

209

86

Preparing to Drive

Driving

153

07/06/28 20:36:18 31SAA610 0158 

Page 160: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

154

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

77

07/06/28 20:36:27 31SAA610 0159 

Page 161: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse. When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause the clutch to wear outfaster.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Manual Transmission

Driving

155

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

07/06/28 20:36:32 31SAA610 0160 

Page 162: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

The engine speed limiter only workswhen you upshift; engine speed isnot limited during downshifts.Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)39 mph (62 km/h)53 mph (85 km/h)

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Manual Transmission

156

07/06/28 20:36:38 31SAA610 0161 

Page 163: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

157

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

Sport model All models except Sport Sport model is shown

07/06/28 20:36:46 31SAA610 0162 

Page 164: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

- This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

161

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

3

3

3

3

All models except Sport Sport model Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission

158

07/06/28 20:36:52 31SAA610 0163 

Page 165: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D to provideengine braking when going down asteep hill. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To help reduce wheel spin.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

3

3

All models except Sport

All models except Sport

Automatic Transmission

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Drive (D )

Second (2)

3 Driving

159

07/06/28 20:37:01 31SAA610 0164 

Page 166: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

-- To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. This position is similarto D, except only gears from first tofourth are selected. The S positionkeeps the transmission from cyclingbetween fourth and fifth gears instop-and-go driving.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

With the shift lever in D or S, youcan also use the paddle shifters toshift the transmission up or down.With the paddle shifters, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal. For more informationon driving with the paddle shifters,see page .162

3

All models except Sport On Sport modelS position (S)First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter

Automatic Transmission

160

07/06/28 20:37:06 31SAA610 0165 

Page 167: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Press thebrake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission

Driving

161

COVERRELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

NOTCH

07/06/28 20:37:15 31SAA610 0166 

Page 168: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

+-

When you are driving in D position,you can shift the transmission up ordown manually with the paddleshifters.

When you pull either paddle shifter,the gear position indicator shows youthe selected gear number.

When the transmission returns todrive mode (D), the displayed gearnumber goes out.

Each time you pull the (right), thetransmission shifts to a higher gear.Pull the (left) to downshift. Youwill see the selected gear number onthe instrument panel.

To shift up or down, use the(right) or (left) paddle shifter oneach side of the steering wheel.

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Using the Paddle Shifters in Dposition (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

162

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

07/06/28 20:37:22 31SAA610 0167 

Page 169: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The transmission downshifts to firstgear and returns to drive mode (D)when the vehicle comes to acomplete stop and the vehicle speedis about 6 mph (10 km/h).

If there is a problem in thetransmission while you are drivingwith the paddle shifters, the Dindicator flashes, the D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission returns to drive mode(D).

Each time you pull either paddleshifter, the transmission shifts onegear up or down. If you want to shiftup or down more than two gears, pullthe paddle shifter twice, pause, andthen pull it again.

The transmission remains in theselected gear if you do not accelerate.

You cannot downshift with thepaddle shifter before the enginespeed reaches the upper limit of thelower gear. If you try to do this, thegear position indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gearposition.

Also, you cannot upshift with thepaddle shifter before the enginespeed reaches the lower limit of thehigher gear.

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm. Driving in thehigher gear helps fuel economy.

The transmission control systemmonitors the accelerator pedal useand your driving conditions. Whenyou press the accelerator pedal as innormal driving, the system judgesthat you are driving at a constantcruising speed without using thepaddle shifters. Under theseconditions, D-paddle shift mode iscanceled, and the transmissionautomatically returns to drive mode(D).

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Driving

163

07/06/28 20:37:29 31SAA610 0168 

Page 170: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

+-

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull eitherpaddle shifter, the gear positionindicator displays on ‘‘M’’ along withthe selected gear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddleshifter. To downshift, pull the(left) paddle shifter.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in first gear,and you must manually upshiftbetween first and fifth gears. Makesure you upshift before the enginespeed reaches the tachometer’s redzone.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5thgear, the transmission downshifts tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

The vehicle slows down to acertain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

With the shift lever in S position, youcan select the sequential shift modeto shift gears; much like a manualtransmission using the paddleshifters, but without a clutch pedal.

To enter the sequential shift mode,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever, move the lever tothe S position, then pull either paddleshifter. To return to drive mode (D),move the shift lever to the D position.While you are driving in thesequential shift mode, thetransmission will not automaticallyreturn to drive mode (D).

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Using the Paddle Shift in Sposition (Sequential Shift Mode)

164

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

07/06/28 20:37:38 31SAA610 0169 

Page 171: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed reaches6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

You cannot downshift with thepaddle shifter before the enginespeed reaches the upper limit of thelower gear. If you try to do this, thegear indicator will flash the numberof the lower gear several times, thenthe indicator will display the highergear number.

If the vehicle speed decreases belowthe redline of the selected lower gearwhile the indicator is flashing, thetransmission downshifts, and theindicator displays the selected gear.

To shiftfrom

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 0 mph (0 km/h)

over 6 mph (10 km/h)

over 21 mph (34 km/h)

over 30 mph (48 km/h)

Here are the speed ranges forupshifting and downshifting.

To shiftfrom

2 1

3 2

4 3

Speed range

under 25 mph (40 km/h)

under 47 mph (75 km/h)

under 75 mph (121 km/h)

When you are in sequential shiftmode, and the vehicle is stopped,pull the (right) paddle shifter toshift to second gear. You will see ‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting in secondgear helps to reduce wheelspin indeep snow or on a slippery surface.

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Starting in Second Gear

Driving

165

07/06/28 20:37:46 31SAA610 0170 

Page 172: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gearand set the parking brake.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gearand set the parking brake.

On Sport model

Parking Tips

Parking

166

07/06/28 20:37:55 31SAA610 0171 

Page 173: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels are drum. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed onthe brake pedal. The anti-lock brakesystem (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

If the front brake pads needreplacing, you will hear a distinctive,metallic screeching sound when youapply the brake pedal. If you do nothave the brake pads replaced, theywill screech all the time. It is normalfor the brakes to occasionally squealor squeak when you apply them.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Driving

167

07/06/28 20:38:02 31SAA610 0172 

Page 174: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

232You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

168

07/06/28 20:38:09 31SAA610 0173 

Page 175: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

232

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Driving

169

07/06/28 20:38:15 31SAA610 0174 

Page 176: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressureindicator to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).218

U.S. models only

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

170

07/06/28 20:38:23 31SAA610 0175 

Page 177: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tireinformation label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

209

210

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Driving

171

07/06/28 20:38:30 31SAA610 0176 

Page 178: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

218

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Changing a Tire with TPMS

172

07/06/28 20:38:38 31SAA610 0177 

Page 179: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties. Your vehicle can be towed behind a

motorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h).Otherwise, severe transmissiondamage will occur.

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer and installer. Followthe manufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

Start the engine.

Check the transmission fluid level(see page ).

Perform the following procedureevery day immediately before youbegin towing. Otherwise severeautomatic transmission damage willoccur.

1.

2.

3.

193

CONTINUED

Do not overfill.

Automatic transmission:

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Towing Your Vehicle Behind aMotorhome

Driving

173

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

07/06/28 20:38:47 31SAA610 0178 

Page 180: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N. Let the enginerun for 3 minutes, then turn it off.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Make sure the radio is off, andremove any item plugged into theaccessory power socket so you donot run down the battery.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

4. 5.

6.

7.

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Extended Towing

174

Severe transmission damage will occurif the vehicle is shif ted f rom reverse toneutral and then towed with the drivewheels on the ground.

Failure to f ollow the recommendedinstructions exactly will result in severeautomatic transmission damage. If youcannot shif t the transmission or startthe engine, your vehicle must betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

07/06/28 20:38:53 31SAA610 0179 

Page 181: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you tow your vehicle with anautomatic transmission, the HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 transmission fluidmust be changed every 2 years or30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichevercomes first.

Move the shifter into the Neutralposition.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Make sure the radio is off, andremove any item plugged into theaccessory power socket so you donot run down the battery.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manual transmission:

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving

175

07/06/28 20:39:00 31SAA610 0180 

Page 182: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

176

07/06/28 20:39:02 31SAA610 0181 

Page 183: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 178....................Maintenance Minder . 179

..............................Fluid Locations . 186........................Adding Engine Oil . 187

Changing the Engine Oil....................................and Filter . 188

..............................Engine Coolant . 190....................Windshield Washers . 192

.......................Transmission Fluid . 193Automatic Transmission

.......................................Fluid . 193....Manual Transmission Fluid . 194

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 195.............................................Lights . 196

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 203.....................................Floor Mats . 203

..............................Audio Antenna . 204..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 205

.................................Wiper Blades . 205...........................................Wheels . 208

...............................................Tires . 208...................Checking the Battery . 214

.............................Vehicle Storage . 216

261

Maintenance

Maintenance

177

07/06/28 20:39:07 31SAA610 0182 

Page 184: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

178

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

07/06/28 20:39:17 31SAA610 0183 

Page 185: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

------------

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page ).

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

69

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

179

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET KNOB

07/06/28 20:39:25 31SAA610 0184 

Page 186: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayedbelow the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the timeis coming soon to take your vehiclein for the required maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

180

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

07/06/28 20:39:30 31SAA610 0185 

Page 187: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

182

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

181

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

07/06/28 20:39:40 31SAA610 0186 

Page 188: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, pressand release the select/reset knob.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on thefollowing.

1.

2.185

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

182

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

07/06/28 20:39:49 31SAA610 0187 

Page 189: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

183

07/06/28 20:39:56 31SAA610 0188 

Page 190: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

139

140

193

210

195

196

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

184

07/06/28 20:40:06 31SAA610 0189 

Page 191: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Maintenance Minder

185

: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of maintenance message in the information display, replacethe brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

184

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds results in higher transmission temperatures.This requires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regularly drive your vehicle underthese conditions, have the transmission fluidchanged at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T only)If you tow a FIT behind a motorhome, thetransmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.(For A/T only)

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

07/06/28 20:40:14 31SAA610 0190 

Page 192: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Fluid Locations

186

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Gray cap)

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OILDIPSTICK(Orange loop)

07/06/28 20:40:18 31SAA610 0191 

Page 193: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Reinstall the engineoil fill cap, and tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes, and recheck theoil level on the engine oil dipstick.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

Maintenance

187

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

07/06/28 20:40:26 31SAA610 0192 

Page 194: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

188

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

07/06/28 20:40:34 31SAA610 0193 

Page 195: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.9.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

189

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

3.8 US qt (3.6 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

07/06/28 20:40:44 31SAA610 0194 

Page 196: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

190

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

07/06/28 20:40:50 31SAA610 0195 

Page 197: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise. Put the radiator cap back on, and

tighten it fully.

3.

4.

2.

1.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

191

RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

07/06/28 20:40:58 31SAA610 0196 

Page 198: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.Check the fluid level by removing

the cap and looking at the levelgauge.

65

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

192

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

07/06/28 20:41:04 31SAA610 0197 

Page 199: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).Insert the dipstick all the way into

the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

193

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

HOTMARK

07/06/28 20:41:14 31SAA610 0198 

Page 200: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle on levelground. Remove the transmissionfiller bolt, and carefully feel insidethe bolt hole with your finger. Thefluid level should be up to the edgeof the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

6.

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid

194

WASHERCorrect level

FILLER BOLTUse only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

07/06/28 20:41:23 31SAA610 0199 

Page 201: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Manual Transmission only

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads/shoes.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Clutch FluidBrake Fluid

Maintenance

195

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

07/06/28 20:41:33 31SAA610 0200 

Page 202: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender, then pull the innerfender cover back.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area, readjustment may berequired. Adjustments should bedone by your dealer or otherqualified mechanic.

1.

2.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

196

HOLDING CLIP

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

07/06/28 20:41:40 31SAA610 0201 

Page 203: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Make sure that the hold-downwire is installed properly andsecurely. You can check itsinstallation from the inspectionwindow on the headlight assembly.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot the wireout of the way, then remove thebulb.

Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

5.

6.

3.

4.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

197

RUBBER WEATHER SEAL

HOLD-DOWNWIRE BULB

ELECTRICALCONNECTOR

HOLD-DOWNWIRE

INSPECTION WINDOW

07/06/28 20:41:49 31SAA610 0202 

Page 204: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender, then pull the innerfender cover back.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clip, andlock it in place by pushing on itscenter.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb. 1.

2.

9.

10.

Lights

Replacing a Parking Light/FrontSide Marker Bulb and a TurnSignal Light Bulb

198

HOLDING CLIP

07/06/28 20:41:55 31SAA610 0203 

Page 205: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clip, andlock it in place by pushing on itscenter.

The fog lights use halogen bulbs.When replacing a bulb, handle itcarefully. See page for moreinformation.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

196

CONTINUED

On Sport modelReplacing a Fog Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

199

PARKING LIGHT/FRONT SIDE MARKERBULB TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB

07/06/28 20:42:03 31SAA610 0204 

Page 206: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the fog light assembly,then tighten the screw.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw.

To remove the fog light assembly,slide it inward, then carefully pullit out of the bumper.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

200

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

SCREW

07/06/28 20:42:12 31SAA610 0205 

Page 207: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the light assemblycover. Remove the cover bycarefully prying in the notch on itsmiddle edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight, back-up light, turn signal light, ortaillight.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pulling it straight outof its socket.

Install the new bulb in the socket.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Reinstall the light assembly cover.1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance

201

LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER

07/06/28 20:42:21 31SAA610 0206 

Page 208: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Open the tailgate. Remove thelight assembly cover by pushing inthe tabs on both sides and pullingthe cover off.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Press the brake pedal to makesure the new bulb is working.

Put the cover back on the lightassembly. Push it in until it locksin place.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

202

07/06/28 20:42:29 31SAA610 0207 

Page 209: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

If your vehicle is equipped withgenuine Honda floor mats, the matshook over floor mat anchors. Thiskeeps the floor mats from slidingforward and possibly interfering withthe pedals or making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

CONTINUED

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats(Optional)

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Maintenance

203

FRONT

LOOP

07/06/28 20:42:36 31SAA610 0208 

Page 210: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

A non-Honda floor mat may not fityour vehicle properly. This couldprevent the proper operation of thefolding rear seats and the passenger’sseat weight sensors. We recommendusing genuine Honda floor mats. Donot put additional floor mats on topof the anchored mats.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

Foor Mats, Audio Antenna

Audio Antenna

204

REAR

Your vehicle is equipped with anantenna at the rear of the roof . Bef oreusing a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,remove the antenna by unscrewing it byhand. This prevents the antenna f rombeing damaged by the car wash brushes.

07/06/28 20:42:42 31SAA610 0209 

Page 211: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

To replace a front wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

1.

CONTINUED

On models with A/CWiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

Maintenance

205

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

07/06/28 20:42:50 31SAA610 0210 

Page 212: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Make sure the three rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notchof the reinforcement, as shown.

2. 3. 4.

Wiper Blades

206

LOCK TAB

BLADEREINFORCEMENT

BLADE

TOP

07/06/28 20:42:58 31SAA610 0211 

Page 213: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To replace the rear wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off the glass.Slide the blade out of the wiperarm.Examine the new wiper blade. If ithas no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade and install them in theslots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyin the direction pointed to by thearrow.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled.

2.

3.

1.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

207

07/06/28 20:43:07 31SAA610 0212 

Page 214: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keepsthe aluminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheelswith harsh chemicals (includingsome commercial wheel cleaners)or a stiff brush can damage theclear-coat. To clean the wheels,use a mild detergent and a softbrush or sponge.

Slide the new blade into the wiperarm. Make sure it is engaged inthe slot along its full length.

Lower the wiper arm.

4.

5.

If equipped

TiresWheels

Wiper Blades, Wheels, Tires

208

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

07/06/28 20:43:16 31SAA610 0213 

Page 215: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.: If equipped

170

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

Maintenance

209

07/06/28 20:43:25 31SAA610 0214 

Page 216: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

248

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size

Tire Size

All models except Sport

Sport model

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection

210

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P175/65R14 81S

P195/55R15 84H

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

07/06/28 20:43:37 31SAA610 0215 

Page 217: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).248

Tires

Tire Service Life Tire Maintenance

TireLabeling

Maintenance

211

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

07/06/28 20:43:46 31SAA610 0216 

Page 218: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels (if equipped). If youdo not, the tire pressure monitoringsystem will not work.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated. Ifyou purchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

Tires

Replacing Tires and WheelsTire Rotation

212

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

07/06/28 20:43:55 31SAA610 0217 

Page 219: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

246

248

Sport model

Sport model

All models except Sport

All models except Sport

Tires

Winter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications

Snow Tires

Maintenance

213

14 x 5 1/2JJ

15 x 6 JJ

P175/65R14 81S

P195/55R15 84H

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

07/06/28 20:44:06 31SAA610 0218 

Page 220: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners, on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used. Check the condition of the battery

monthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors. The test indicator window’slocation differs according to thebattery manufacturer.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Tires, Checking the Battery

Checking the BatteryTire Chains

214

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

07/06/28 20:44:13 31SAA610 0219 

Page 221: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theaudio system may disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbars to enter the code (see page

).

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting is lost. To reset the time, seepage .

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

129

128

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

215

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

07/06/28 20:44:19 31SAA610 0220 

Page 222: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Vehicle Storage

216

07/06/28 20:44:28 31SAA610 0221 

Page 223: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 218....................Changing a Flat Tire . 219

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 224................................Jump Starting . 226

..............If the Engine Overheats . 228.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 230..........Charging System Indicator . 230

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231...............Brake System Indicator . 232

..............................................Fuses . 233..............................Fuse Locations . 236

......................Emergency Towing . 238..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 239

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

217

07/06/28 20:44:32 31SAA610 0222 

Page 224: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

On vehicles with the TPMSsystem, the low tire pressureindicator comes on and stays onafter you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the compact spare tire, theTPMS indicator comes on and thelow tire pressure indicator goes off.

Compact Spare Tire

218

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

07/06/28 20:44:40 31SAA610 0223 

Page 225: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Open the tailgate. Raise the cargoarea floor lid by lifting it up withthe strap that has a loop. To keepthe floor lid open, hook the loop ofthe strap to a leg of the rear centerhead restraint.

Take the tool kit out of the sparetire.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

219

JACK

STRAP

TOOL KIT

SPARETIRE

LOOP

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

07/06/28 20:44:48 31SAA610 0224 

Page 226: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Take the jack out of the cargoarea.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack by lifting it straightup.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

On all models except Sport,remove the wheel cover bycarefully prying under its edgewith the flat tip of the extension.

5.

6.

7. 8.

Changing a Flat Tire

220

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT

WHEEL COVER

EXTENSION

07/06/28 20:44:56 31SAA610 0225 

Page 227: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by amark molded into the underside ofthe body (Sport model). Turn theend bracket clockwise until the topof the jack contacts the jackingpoint. Make sure the jacking pointtab is resting in the jack notch.

9.

11.

12.10.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

221

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

BRAKE HUB

JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

07/06/28 20:45:03 31SAA610 0226 

Page 228: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

On Sport model:

Changing a Flat Tire

222

Fornormaltire

Forsparetire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

07/06/28 20:45:10 31SAA610 0227 

Page 229: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

Store the jack. Place the tool kit inthe center of the flat tire.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the cargo area. Make sure itwill not get scratched or damaged.

Remove the strap loop from theleg of the head restraint, thenlower the floor lid, and close thetailgate.

Align the valve mark on the wheelcover to the tire valve on thewheel, then install the wheel cover.

Make sure the wire support ring ishooked into the clips around theedge of the wheel cover.

1.2.

19.

20.

21.

All models except Sport

Changing a Flat Tire

Installing a wheel cover

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

223

CLIPS CLIPS

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

07/06/28 20:45:19 31SAA610 0228 

Page 230: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

Make sure the wire support ring ison the outer side of the tire valveas shown.

3.

226

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start

224

WIRE SUPPORT RING

07/06/28 20:45:27 31SAA610 0229 

Page 231: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

154

77238

214

226

233

238

If the Engine Won’t Start

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

225

07/06/28 20:45:36 31SAA610 0230 

Page 232: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C (ifequipped), audio system, lights,etc. Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake.

1.

2.

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting

226

BOOSTER BATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

07/06/28 20:45:43 31SAA610 0231 

Page 233: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the stay as shown. Donot connect this jumper cable toany other part of the engine.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

227

07/06/28 20:45:50 31SAA610 0232 

Page 234: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

The high temperature indicatorshould be off under most conditions.If the engine coolant temperaturegets higher than normal, theindicator will blink. If it stays on, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the hightemperature indicator blinking orremaining on. Or you may see steamor spray coming from under thehood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andcheck the high temperatureindicator. If the high heat is due tooverloading, the engine shouldstart to cool down almostimmediately. If it does, wait untilthe high temperature indicatorgoes off, then continue driving.

If the high temperature indicatorstays on, turn off the engine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the Engine Overheats

228

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the high temperatureindicator on can cause serious damageto your engine.

07/06/28 20:45:56 31SAA610 0233 

Page 235: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the hightemperature indicator goes offbefore checking the radiator.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe high temperature indicator. Ifit begins to blink or comes onagain, the engine needs repair(see on page

).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

9.

8.7.

6.

5.

10.

11.

238

238

EmergencyTowing

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

229

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

07/06/28 20:46:04 31SAA610 0234 

Page 236: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

1.

2.

4.

3.

139

187

238

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

230

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

07/06/28 20:46:14 31SAA610 0235 

Page 237: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It takes atleast three days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).254

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes Emissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

231

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

07/06/28 20:46:21 31SAA610 0236 

Page 238: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.The brake system indicator (red)

normally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, and as a reminder to checkthe parking brake. It will stay on ifyou do not fully release the parkingbrake.

If the brake system indicator (red)comes on while driving, the brakefluid level is probably low. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads/shoes.

195 238Emergency

Towing

Brake SystemIndicator (Red)

Brake System Indicator

232

U.S. Canada

07/06/28 20:46:29 31SAA610 0237 

Page 239: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The primary under-hood fuse box isin the engine compartment on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.The interior fuse box is behind the

driver’s coin tray. To access it,remove the tray by turning the dialcounterclockwise then pulling ittoward you. To install the coin tray,line up the tabs on the bottom, pivotthe tray up to engage its side clips,then turn the dial clockwise.

The secondary fuse box is on thepositive terminal of the battery.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

233

TAB

INTERIOR

DIAL

UNDER-HOOD UNDER-HOOD(On Battery)

DRIVER’S COIN TRAY

07/06/28 20:46:36 31SAA610 0238 

Page 240: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse boxes bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theprimary under-hood fuse box andall the fuses in the interior fusebox by pulling out each one withthe fuse puller provided in theinterior fuse box.

3.1.

2.

4.

236 237

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

234

FUSE

BLOWN FUSE PULLER

07/06/28 20:46:44 31SAA610 0239 

Page 241: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code(see page ).

6.

5.

128

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

235

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

07/06/28 20:46:51 31SAA610 0240 

Page 242: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

* *

No. Circuits Protected

No.

Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

123456789

Back Up LightNot UsedMETERTurn LightNot UsedFront WipersSRSDaytime Running LightRear Defogger

101112131415161718

192021222324252627282930313233

10 A

10 A10 A

30 A10 A

(7.5 A)20 A

7.5 A15 A10 A10 A15 A20 A20 A20 A

(7.5 A)(10 A)

(20 A)10 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A15 A

(20 A)20 A

7.5 A15 A15 A

HACFuel PumpRear WiperSRSIGPLeft Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowRight Front Power WindowTPMSDaytime Running LightNot UsedNot UsedFog LightSmall LightLAFNot UsedABSRadioACC SocketPower Door LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedLAFDBWIgnition Coil

1 : If equipped 2 : Canadian models

2

1

2

1

1

Fuse Locations

236

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

07/06/28 20:46:57 31SAA610 0241 

Page 243: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

No.

Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected12345678

80 A Battery

910111213141516

30 A30 A30 A20 A20 A10 A30 A15 A

80 A60 A50 A30 A40 A40 A

(30 A)10 A

BatteryEPSIgnitionABSBlower RelayPower Window(HAC Option)Back Up

Small LightCooling FanCondenser Fan, MG ClutchRight HeadlightLeft HeadlightHazardABS F/SHorn, Stop

: If equipped

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

237

Primary Fuse Box

PRIMARY

Secondary Fuse Box (On the battery)

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES

07/06/28 20:47:05 31SAA610 0242 

Page 244: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

Start the engine.Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N. Let the enginerun for 3 minutes, then turn it off.Turn off the engine.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Emergency Towing

238

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

07/06/28 20:47:16 31SAA610 0243 

Page 245: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see page ).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

To use the towing hook:Take the towing hook and theextension out of the tool kit in thecargo area.

Lift the upper part of the coverfrom the bumper by pushing thelower part with your finger. Put acloth into the space behind theupper part of the cover. Using theextension, remove the cover fully.

1.

2.

238

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

239

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

07/06/28 20:47:24 31SAA610 0244 

Page 246: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Screw the towing hook into thebolt hole behind the bumper, thentighten the hook securely with theextension.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

240

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

07/06/28 20:47:29 31SAA610 0245 

Page 247: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 242................................Specifications . 244

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 246

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 246.................................Treadwear . 246

......................................Traction . 246.............................Temperature . 247

.................................Tire Labeling . 248Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 249

.......................Emissions Controls . 251.....................The Clean Air Act . 251

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 251

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 251

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 251

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 252....................PGM-FI System . 252

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 252

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 252

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 252

....................Replacement Parts . 252..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 253

........................Emissions Testing . 254

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

241

07/06/28 20:47:32 31SAA610 0246 

Page 248: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

Identif ication Numbers

242

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

07/06/28 20:47:36 31SAA610 0247 

Page 249: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe front of the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

243

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

07/06/28 20:47:41 31SAA610 0248 

Page 250: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

Specifications

244

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Seating Capacities

Capacities

157.4 in (3,999 mm)LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

66.2 in (1,682 mm)60.0 in (1,524 mm)96.5 in (2,450 mm)57.3 in (1,456 mm)57.1 in (1,451 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

0.11 US gal (0.4 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

10.8 US gal (41 )

3.8 US qt (3.6 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

1.7 US qt (1.6 )1.6 US qt (1.5 )

6.3 US qt (6.0 )2.5 US qt (2.4 )1.43 US gal (5.4 )1.00 US gal (3.8 )

1.40 US gal (5.3 )0.98 US gal (3.7 )

3.6 US qt (3.4 )4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

SKJ20DR-M13IZFR6K-13

10.4 : 191.3 cu-in (1,497 cm )

2.87 x 3.52 in (73.0 x 89.4 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHCVTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

523

TotalFrontRear

Fuel tank

Engine oil

Enginecoolant

AutomatictransmissionfluidManualtransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :2 :

(NGK)(DENSO)

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

TotalAutomaticTransmission

ManualTransmission

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanadaVehicles

1

2

2

07/06/28 20:47:58 31SAA610 0249 

Page 251: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

- -

**

---

---------

---

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

245

Air Conditioning

Battery

Lights

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

SP-10

12 V12 V

60/55 W21 W

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 W

5 W

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Capacity

12 V

HeadlightsFront turn signal lightsParking lights/side markerlightsFog lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightCargo area LightTaillightsHigh-mount brake light

8 W3 CP21 W21/5 W21 W

5 W

55 W

3 CP

Interior

Under-hood

0.0 in (0 mm)0.10 in (2.5 mm)

0°1°30’

3°45’

Size

Pressure

P175/65R14 81SP195/55R15 84HT115/70D14 88MT125/70D14 93M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

12 V 40 AH/20 HR34 AH/5 HR12 V

12 V 32 AH/5 HR

See page 236 or the fuse labelattached to the back of the driver’scoin tray.See page 237 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

High/Low

(Amber)

1 :2 :

(HB2)

(Amber)

(H11)

Front/Rear

Spare

FrontRearSpare

All models except SportSport model

(Amber)

1

2

2

1

07/06/28 20:48:22 31SAA610 0250 

Page 252: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction

246

07/06/28 20:48:30 31SAA610 0251 

Page 253: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature

TechnicalInform

ation

247

07/06/28 20:48:34 31SAA610 0252 

Page 254: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

--

--

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer’sidentification mark.Tire type code.Date of manufacture.YearWeek

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).Tire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Rim diameter in inches.

DOT

B97R

FW6X2202

P

19555

R

1584

H

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)Tire Size

248

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1) Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire Pressure

(2)(3)

Maximum Tire Load(4)

(1)(4)

(2)

(1)

(3)

DOT B97R FW6X 2202P195/55R15 84H

07/06/28 20:48:50 31SAA610 0253 

Page 255: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

-Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire can hold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry at maximum airpressure.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.) CONTINUED

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Required FederalExplanation

TechnicalInform

ation

249

07/06/28 20:49:00 31SAA610 0254 

Page 256: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

250

07/06/28 20:49:05 31SAA610 0255 

Page 257: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

251

07/06/28 20:49:13 31SAA610 0256 

Page 258: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

Emissions Controls

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

252

07/06/28 20:49:22 31SAA610 0257 

Page 259: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

253

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

07/06/28 20:49:28 31SAA610 0258 

Page 260: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

254

07/06/28 20:49:36 31SAA610 0259 

Page 261: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

255

07/06/28 20:49:41 31SAA610 0260 

Page 262: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

256

07/06/28 20:49:43 31SAA610 0261 

Page 263: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

....Customer Service Information . 258....................Warranty Coverages . 259

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 260

.....................Authorized Manuals . 261

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

257

07/06/28 20:49:46 31SAA610 0262 

Page 264: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

242

Customer Service Information

258

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

07/06/28 20:49:58 31SAA610 0263 

Page 265: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty Coverages

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

259

07/06/28 20:50:08 31SAA610 0264 

Page 266: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

260

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

07/06/28 20:50:12 31SAA610 0265 

Page 267: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

261

Form Description

2008 Honda Fit Service Manual

2008 Honda Fit

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2008 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual

2008 Honda Fit Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Fit Honda Service History

2008 Honda Fit Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SAA01

61SAA01EL

61SAA30

31SAA610

31SAAM10

31SAAQ10

HON-R

www. helminc. com

07/06/28 20:50:20 31SAA610 0266 

Page 268: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

262

07/06/28 20:50:23 31SAA610 0267 

Page 269: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 144ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 78...............Accessory Power Socket . 99

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 188.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 75

...........................Advanced Airbags . 27...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 22

..............Air Conditioning System . 102.........................................Usage . 103

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 210

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 136......................................Antifreeze . 190

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 62, 168

...................................Operation . 168..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 128

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 78................................Audio System . 107

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 20.............Automatic Speed Control . 131..............Automatic Transmission . 157

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 244...............Checking Fluid Level . 193

..........................Paddle Shifters . 162.......................................Shifting . 157

Shift Lever Position...............................Indicators . 157

................Shift Lever Positions . 158....................Shift Lock Release . 161

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 127

............................Capacities Chart . 244.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 60, 230............................Jump Starting . 226

..............................Maintenance . 214............................Specifications . 245

..............................Before Driving . 135....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

...........................Beverage Holders . 98..................................Booster Seats . 50

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 168

.............Break-in, New Linings . 136....................Bulb Replacement . 201

...........................................Fluid . 195.........................................Parking . 96

.................System Indicator . 60, 232..........................System Design . 167........................Wear Indicators . 167

.............................Braking System . 167.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 136

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 74..................Brights, Headlights . 72, 73

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 201

..............................Brake Lights . 201Front Parking Lights/

...Front Side Marker Lights . 198.................................Fog Lights . 199.................................Headlights . 196

.........High-mount Brake Light . 202............................Specifications . 245

....................................Taillights . 201............Turn Signal Lights . 198, 201

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 196

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

07/06/28 20:50:28 31SAA610 0268 

Page 270: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

**

..............................................Cargo . 146....................Cargo, How to Carry . 146

.............................Carrying Cargo . 146.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 124.....................CD Error Messages . 123

.......................................CD Player . 114.................................Center Pocket . 97

........................Certification Label . 242.................................Chains, Tires . 214

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 219.................................Changing Oil . 188

........................................How to . 188......................................When to . 179

...Charging System Indicator . 60, 230..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68............Checklist, Before Driving . 153

.....................................Child Safety . 34..............................Booster Seats . 50

.............................Child Seats . 34, 41.....Important Safety Reminders . 34

..........................................Infants . 39............................Large Children . 49

.........................................LATCH . 43......................Risks with Airbags . 35

.............................Small Children . 40

.........................................Tethers . 47...........................Warning Labels . 36

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35.................................Child Seats . 34, 41

.........................................LATCH . 43..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47

..................Childproof Door Locks . 80

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 203....................Cleaning the Wheels . 208

..............................................Clock . 129...................................Clutch Fluid . 195

........................CO in the Exhaust . 251............Cold Weather, Starting in . 154

...............Consumer Information . 258.............Controls, Instruments and . 57

Coolant........................................Adding . 190

....................................Checking . 140.........................Proper Solution . 190

...............Temperature Indicator . 63Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 251................Cruise Control Indicator . 65............Cruise Control Operation . 131

.....................................Cup Holders . 98.............Customer Service Office . 258

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 58

............Daytime Running Lights . 73Daytime Running Lights

...................................Indicator . 65

.................................Dead Battery . 226............Defects, Reporting Safety . 260

................Defogger, Rear Window . 74

..............Defrosting the Windows . 105.........................Detachable Anchor . 93

....................................Dimensions . 244.........Dimming the Headlights . 72, 73

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 193

..................................Engine Oil . 139..........................Directional Signals . 72

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 167.......................................Disc Care . 124

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 123.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 189

Doors..............Childproof Door Locks . 80..............Locking and Unlocking . 79

......................Power Door Locks . 79

Index

D

II

07/06/28 20:50:33 31SAA610 0269 

Page 271: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 246Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 155...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 151....................................Economy . 141

........................Driving Guidelines . 152Driving with the Paddle

.......................................Shifters . 162..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 205

..............................Economy, Fuel . 141..................................Emergencies . 217

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 226...........Brake System Indicator . 232

................Changing a Flat Tire . 219.....Charging System Indicator . 230

..................Checking the Fuses . 234.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 74

............................Jump Starting . 226.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 230...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231

..................Overheated Engine . 228.......................................Towing . 238

...........................Emergency Brake . 96......................Emergency Flashers . 74

......................Emergency Towing . 238.......................Emissions Controls . 251........................Emissions Testing . 254

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 190

Coolant Temperature...................................Indicator . 63

.........................If It Won’t Start . 224Malfunction Indicator

......................................Lamp . 231.......................................Oil Life . 179

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 230

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 187...............................Overheating . 228

............................Specifications . 244

....................Speed Limiter . 156, 160.......................................Starting . 154

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 136.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 251

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 16

...................................Fan, Interior . 103.........................................Features . 101

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 137Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 205...............................................Oil . 188

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 219

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 193

..........................................Brake . 195.........................................Clutch . 195

..............Manual Transmission . 194..................Windshield Washer . 192

.........Folding the Rear Seat Down . 91...............Folding the Rear Seat Up . 90

..........................Four-way Flashers . 74..............................Front Airbags . 9, 25

Front Seat......................................Adjusting . 86

.....................................Airbags . 9, 25

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

07/06/28 20:50:38 31SAA610 0270 

Page 272: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 141..........................................Gasohol . 136.........................................Gasoline . 136

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 62...........................................Gauge . 68

................Octane Requirement . 136........................Tank, Refueling . 137

................Gas Station Procedures . 137Gauges

...............................................Fuel . 68Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 158..............Manual Transmission . 155

........................................Glove Box . 98Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.....................................(GVWR) . 148

.................................................Fuel . 136..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68

......................Fill Door and Cap . 137.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 62

...........................................Gauge . 68................Octane Requirement . 136

...............................Oxygenated . 136........................Tank, Refueling . 137

...............................Fuel Economy . 141.....................Fuses, Checking the . 234

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 196..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74

Headlights........................................Aiming . 196

.......Daytime Running Lights . 73..................High Beam Indicator . 65

.........................Reminder Chime . 73........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 196

...................................Turning on . 73..............................Head Restraints . 87

.....................Heating and Cooling . 102............................High Beam Lever . 73

.......................Hood, Opening the . 138..............................................Horn . 4, 70

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 195

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 242

Ignition..............................................Keys . 76

...........................................Switch . 78............Timing Control System . 252

........................Immobilizer System . 77.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

Index

G

H

I

IV

07/06/28 20:50:43 31SAA610 0271 

Page 273: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 76

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 221.......................................Jack, Tire . 219

................................Jump Starting . 226

.......................Label, Certification . 242.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19...........LATCH Anchorage System . 43

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 196

.......................................Indicator . 59.........................................Parking . 72

..................................Turn Signal . 72....................................Load Limits . 147

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 78Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 78..........................Childproof Door . 80

.................................Power Door . 79........................................Tailgate . 81

........................Low Coolant Level . 140.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 62

Indicators......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 62, 168

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 60, 232

................Charging System . 60, 230...........................Check Fuel Cap . 68

.............................Cruise Control . 65............Door and Tailgate Open . 62

DRL (Daytime Running..................................Lights) . 65

.EPS (Electric Power Steering) . 62.....................................Fog Light . 64...................................High Beam . 65

......................High Temperature . 63........Key (Immobilizer System) . 66

.....................................Lights On . 64......................................Low Fuel . 62

................Low Oil Pressure . 60, 230.......................Low Temperature . 63

............Low Tire Pressure . 64, 170..........Maintenance Minder . 66, 179

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231.................Passenger Airbag Off . 31

..............Seat Belt Reminder . 18, 60..........................Security System . 66

.....................Side Airbag Off . 31, 61

.........................................SRS . 30, 61.................................TPMS . 64, 171

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 63

..............................Washer Level . 65.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59

...............................Infant Restraint . 39......................................Infant Seats . 39

............Tether Anchorage Point . 47...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 209

........Recommended Pressures . 210...................................Inside Mirror . 95

.............................Inspection, Tire . 210....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

............................Instrument Panel . 59........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74

..............Instruments and Controls . 57.................................Interior Lights . 99

........................................Introduction . i

Index

L

K

J

IND

EX

V

07/06/28 20:50:49 31SAA610 0272 

Page 274: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 230................................Lower Anchors . 43

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 244...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 146...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 150

..................................Maintenance . 177......Main Items and Sub Items . 182

........................................Minder . 179.........................Minder Indicator . 66

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 184

..........................................Safety . 178.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231

...................Manual Transmission . 155...............Checking Fluid Level . 194

.......................................Shifting . 155........Manual Transmission Fluid . 194

.........................Meters, Gauges . 59, 67...................Methanol in Gasoline . 136

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 95...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 144

...................Neutral Gear Position . 159..................New Vehicle Break-in . 136

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 156...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 242

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 136.........................................Odometer . 68

...............................Odometer, Trip . 67Oil

........................Change, How to . 188......................Change, When to . 179......................Checking Engine . 139..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 230

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 187

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 251..............................Outside Mirrors . 95

....................Overheating, Engine . 228....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 184

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 136

..............................Paddle Shifters . 162..............Panel Brightness Control . 74

........................Park Gear Position . 158...........................................Parking . 166

.................................Parking Brake . 96Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 60, 232.................................Parking Lights . 72

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 166

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 31.............................PGM-FI System . 252

...................................Pollen Filter . 205..........................Power Door Locks . 79

..................Power Socket Location . 99..............................Power Windows . 94

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16........................Preparing to Drive . 153

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16

Index

M

N

P

O

VI

07/06/28 20:50:55 31SAA610 0273 

Page 275: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

CONTINUED

........................Protecting Children . 34.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.......Protecting Larger Children . 49.........Protecting Small Children . 40

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 47

.............................Using LATCH . 43

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 260

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54

..............................Safety Messages . iii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 20.....................................Cleaning . 203

.....................Detachable Anchor . 93................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19

................................Maintenance . 20Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 18, 60...................System Components . 18

...............Use During Pregnancy . 16...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 86.........................Select/Reset Knob . 67

...............................Serial Number . 242...........................Service Intervals . 179...........................Service Manual . 261

.........Service Station Procedures . 137..........................Setting the Clock . 129

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 157........................Shift Lock Release . 161

...................Radiator Overheating . 228.............Radio/CD Sound System . 107

.................Radio Theft Protection . 128...........................Readiness Codes . 231

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 201....................Rear Seat, Folding . 90, 91

............................Rear View Mirror . 95.................Rear Window Defogger . 74

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 71...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 87

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 156........................................Refueling . 137

.......................Reminder Indicators . 59

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 205

................Engine Oil and Filter . 188..........................................Fuses . 233

................................Light Bulbs . 196....................................Schedule . 185

...........................................Tires . 212.............................Wiper Blades . 205

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 21

..........Reporting Safety Defects . 260Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 140, 190...............................Restraint, Child . 34

..................Reverse Gear Position . 159...........................Reverse Lockout . 161

................................Rotation, Tire . 212

Index

IND

EX

R

S

VII

07/06/28 20:51:01 31SAA610 0274 

Page 276: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

................................Side Airbags . 9, 28...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 30

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 30

Side Marker Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 198...............................Signaling Turns . 72

.....................................Snow Tires . 213................................Sound System . 107

......................................Spare Tire . 218....................................Spark Plugs . 244

........................Specifications . 244, 245

................................Speed Control . 131

........................Speed Limiter . 156, 160..........SRS, Additional Information . 22

...Additional Safety Precautions . 33.............................Airbag Service . 32

......Airbag System Components . 22How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 61

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78.......................Starting the Engine . 154

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 154

................With a Dead Battery . 226........Steam Coming from Engine . 228

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 75

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 78...............Steering Wheel Buttons . 131

...................Stereo Sound System . 107....................Storing Your Vehicle . 216

..........................................Sun Visor . 99Supplemental Restraint

..................................System . 9, 22

......................................Servicing . 32.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 61

...................System Components . 22..................................Synthetic Oil . 188

Tailgate............................Open Indicator . 62

.................................Opening the . 81..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 201

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 217Technical Descriptions

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 246.....Emissions Control Systems . 251

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 136Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 253Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) Required.........Federal Explanation . 249

...................Temperature Indicator . 63..............Tether Anchorage Points . 47

................Theft Protection, Radio . 128..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 253

..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 75..........................Time, Setting the . 129

....................................Tire Chains . 214.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 219

...........................Tire Information . 248

Index

T

VIII

07/06/28 20:51:05 31SAA610 0275 

Page 277: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

...............................................Tires . 208..............................Air Pressure . 210

........................................Chains . 214.........................Checking Wear . 210

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 246......................................Inflation . 209

..................................Inspection . 210.....................................Labeling . 248

Low Tire Pressure.........................Indicator . 64, 170..............................Maintenance . 211

Pressure Monitoring..................................System . 170...................................Replacing . 212

......................................Rotating . 212...........................................Snow . 213

............................Specifications . 245...................Tools, Tire Changing . 219

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 173

................Emergency Wrecker . 238TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

................................System) . 170.............................Indicator . 64, 171

Required Federal............................Explanation . 249

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 193Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 194..................Fluid Selection . 193, 194

..............Identification Number . 243.............Shifting the Automatic . 157

..................Shifting the Manual . 155.....................................Treadwear . 246.......................................Trip Meter . 67

....................................Turn Signals . 72

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 217

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 246........................Unleaded Gasoline . 136

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 189

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 147......................Vehicle Dimensions . 244

....Vehicle Identification Number . 242

.............................Vehicle Storage . 216.....................................Ventilation . 104

.................................................VIN . 242..................................Viscosity, Oil . 187

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54

..................Warranty Coverages . 259Washers, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 192..............Fluid Level Indicator . 65

.....................................Operation . 71Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 75............Alignment and Balance . 212..........Aluminum Alloy Wheels . 208

.....................................Cleaning . 208..............................Wrench, Nut . 221

Windows...................................Auto Down . 94

..................Operating the Power . 94...........................Rear, Defogger . 74

Index

V

W

U

IND

EX

IX

07/06/28 20:51:11 31SAA610 0276 

Page 278: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

**

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 71...................................Defroster . 105

.....................................Washers . 192Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 205.....................................Operation . 71

....................................Worn Tires . 210.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 238

:: U.S. only

Canada only

Index

X

07/06/28 20:51:15 31SAA610 0277 

Page 279: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

07/06/28 20:51:17 31SAA610 0278 

Page 280: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

07/06/28 20:51:19 31SAA610 0279 

Page 281: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

07/06/28 20:51:21 31SAA610 0280 

Page 282: Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - American Honda Motor …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AAA080/AAA0808OM.pdf · Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) ... This entire book is filled with important

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:

10.8 US gal (41 )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

3.8 US qt (3.6 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) (see page

).

Front/Rear:

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity (including differential):1.6 US qt (1.5 )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

187

193

194195

07/06/28 20:51:34 31SAA610 0281